supplier qualification

62
SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 7.0: Supplier Qualification Based on SAP Solution Manager Content Target Audience System Administrators Consultants INTERNAL Document version: 1.0 – 2011-11-08

Upload: venkatesh-srinivasan

Post on 27-Dec-2015

38 views

Category:

Documents


1 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Supplier Qualification

SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier QualificationBased on SAP Solution Manager Content

Target Audience System Administrators Consultants

INTERNALDocument version 10 ndash 2011-11-08

Document History

CAUTION

Before you start the implementation make sure you have the latest version of SAP Solution

Manager content For more information on the SAP Solution Manager content see SAP Note

1853038

The following table provides an overview of the most important document changes

Version Date Description

10 2011-11-08 Initial Version

262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Important Information About This Document 7

Chapter 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch

Supplier Self-Registration 9

21 Activate Business Function 9

22 SAP Notes 9

23 User Management 9

231 User Management 9

232 More Information About User Management 10

24 Technical Settings 10

241 Supplier Qualification Overview 10

242 Performing Technical Settings 11

243 More Information About Technical Settings 11

25 E-Mail Settings 12

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer 12

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-

SUS) 12

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-

Services 12

2612 Role Settings 13

26121 Activate Role 13

2613 IDoc Settings 13

26131 Setting Up IDocs 13

2614 Settings for the Replication 16

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication 18

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (Local

ExtCl) 19

2621 Technical Settings 19

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 362

26212 More Information About Technical Settings 21

2622 Role and User Settings 21

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings 24

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI) 24

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP 25

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory 27

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services

to SAP ERP 27

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27

28 Questionnaire Settings 28

29 Self-Registration User Interface 28

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 28

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners 28

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services 29

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL) 29

212 Business Add-Ins 29

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29

2131 Importing Business Scenarios 29

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31

Chapter 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch

Supplier Self-Registration 33

31 SAP Notes 33

32 Supplier Qualification Applications 33

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification 33

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview 33

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification 34

322 E-Mail Settings 35

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners 28

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27

325 Questionnaire Settings 37

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory 37

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25

462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

332 Configuring Supplier Directory 27

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier

Directory 40

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-

SUS) 40

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-

Services 12

342 Role Settings 13

3421 Activate Role 13

343 IDoc Settings 13

3431 Setting Up IDocs 13

344 Settings for the Replication 44

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication 45

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended

Classic) 47

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-

Services 47

352 Technical Settings 47

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19

353 Role and User Settings 21

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings 24

36 Business Add-Ins 52

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29

371 Importing Business Scenarios 29

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31

Chapter 4 Supplier Qualification 57

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier

Qualification 57

42 Registering Suppliers 57

43 Managing Supplier Relationship 57

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

1 Important Information About This Document

The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered

with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP

Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to

Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation

This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other

documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings

CAUTION

This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The

complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager

For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP

SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade

Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713

Business Functions

SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the

following Business Functions

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations

SRM Catalog Innovations

SRM Approval Process

SRM Continuous Innovations

SRM Implementation Simplification

SRM Service Procurement Innovations

SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services

SRM Supplier Collaboration

SRM Self-Service Procurement

SRM Analytics

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2

SRM Analytics 2

SRM Continuous Innovations 2

SRM Catalog Innovations 2

SRM Supplier Collaboration 2

1 Important Information About This Document

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762

For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom

SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches

1 Important Information About This Document

862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Activate Business Functions

22 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

517484

729355

836200

23 User Management

231 User Management

For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an

anonymous user with the necessary authorizations

Prerequisites

You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01

You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user

The user has to be of type service user

Procedure

Assigning Anonymous Users

You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find

the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing

DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962

1 Double-click the service name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are the following

ROS_SELF_REG

ROS_SELF_EDIT

ROS_PRESCREEN

You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

232 More Information About User Management

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles

24 Technical Settings

241 Supplier Qualification Overview

Features

Figure 1

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

242 Performing Technical Settings

Procedure

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in

transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate

Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can

find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM

Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage

To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration

application proceed as follows

1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM

CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display

2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat

3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the

question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)

Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login

Prerequisites

You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM

SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page

Procedure

Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab

page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the

page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying

the supplier self-registration page is applied

243 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

Maintain Services SICF

Run the following program in SAP SRM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162

Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

25 E-Mail Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

Prerequisites

Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

Procedure

Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

25 E-Mail Settings

1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 2: Supplier Qualification

Document History

CAUTION

Before you start the implementation make sure you have the latest version of SAP Solution

Manager content For more information on the SAP Solution Manager content see SAP Note

1853038

The following table provides an overview of the most important document changes

Version Date Description

10 2011-11-08 Initial Version

262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Important Information About This Document 7

Chapter 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch

Supplier Self-Registration 9

21 Activate Business Function 9

22 SAP Notes 9

23 User Management 9

231 User Management 9

232 More Information About User Management 10

24 Technical Settings 10

241 Supplier Qualification Overview 10

242 Performing Technical Settings 11

243 More Information About Technical Settings 11

25 E-Mail Settings 12

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer 12

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-

SUS) 12

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-

Services 12

2612 Role Settings 13

26121 Activate Role 13

2613 IDoc Settings 13

26131 Setting Up IDocs 13

2614 Settings for the Replication 16

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication 18

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (Local

ExtCl) 19

2621 Technical Settings 19

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 362

26212 More Information About Technical Settings 21

2622 Role and User Settings 21

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings 24

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI) 24

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP 25

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory 27

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services

to SAP ERP 27

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27

28 Questionnaire Settings 28

29 Self-Registration User Interface 28

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 28

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners 28

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services 29

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL) 29

212 Business Add-Ins 29

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29

2131 Importing Business Scenarios 29

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31

Chapter 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch

Supplier Self-Registration 33

31 SAP Notes 33

32 Supplier Qualification Applications 33

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification 33

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview 33

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification 34

322 E-Mail Settings 35

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners 28

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27

325 Questionnaire Settings 37

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory 37

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25

462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

332 Configuring Supplier Directory 27

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier

Directory 40

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-

SUS) 40

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-

Services 12

342 Role Settings 13

3421 Activate Role 13

343 IDoc Settings 13

3431 Setting Up IDocs 13

344 Settings for the Replication 44

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication 45

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended

Classic) 47

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-

Services 47

352 Technical Settings 47

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19

353 Role and User Settings 21

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings 24

36 Business Add-Ins 52

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29

371 Importing Business Scenarios 29

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31

Chapter 4 Supplier Qualification 57

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier

Qualification 57

42 Registering Suppliers 57

43 Managing Supplier Relationship 57

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

1 Important Information About This Document

The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered

with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP

Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to

Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation

This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other

documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings

CAUTION

This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The

complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager

For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP

SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade

Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713

Business Functions

SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the

following Business Functions

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations

SRM Catalog Innovations

SRM Approval Process

SRM Continuous Innovations

SRM Implementation Simplification

SRM Service Procurement Innovations

SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services

SRM Supplier Collaboration

SRM Self-Service Procurement

SRM Analytics

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2

SRM Analytics 2

SRM Continuous Innovations 2

SRM Catalog Innovations 2

SRM Supplier Collaboration 2

1 Important Information About This Document

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762

For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom

SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches

1 Important Information About This Document

862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Activate Business Functions

22 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

517484

729355

836200

23 User Management

231 User Management

For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an

anonymous user with the necessary authorizations

Prerequisites

You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01

You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user

The user has to be of type service user

Procedure

Assigning Anonymous Users

You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find

the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing

DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962

1 Double-click the service name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are the following

ROS_SELF_REG

ROS_SELF_EDIT

ROS_PRESCREEN

You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

232 More Information About User Management

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles

24 Technical Settings

241 Supplier Qualification Overview

Features

Figure 1

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

242 Performing Technical Settings

Procedure

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in

transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate

Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can

find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM

Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage

To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration

application proceed as follows

1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM

CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display

2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat

3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the

question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)

Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login

Prerequisites

You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM

SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page

Procedure

Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab

page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the

page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying

the supplier self-registration page is applied

243 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

Maintain Services SICF

Run the following program in SAP SRM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162

Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

25 E-Mail Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

Prerequisites

Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

Procedure

Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

25 E-Mail Settings

1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 3: Supplier Qualification

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Important Information About This Document 7

Chapter 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch

Supplier Self-Registration 9

21 Activate Business Function 9

22 SAP Notes 9

23 User Management 9

231 User Management 9

232 More Information About User Management 10

24 Technical Settings 10

241 Supplier Qualification Overview 10

242 Performing Technical Settings 11

243 More Information About Technical Settings 11

25 E-Mail Settings 12

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer 12

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-

SUS) 12

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-

Services 12

2612 Role Settings 13

26121 Activate Role 13

2613 IDoc Settings 13

26131 Setting Up IDocs 13

2614 Settings for the Replication 16

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication 18

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (Local

ExtCl) 19

2621 Technical Settings 19

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 362

26212 More Information About Technical Settings 21

2622 Role and User Settings 21

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings 24

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI) 24

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP 25

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory 27

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services

to SAP ERP 27

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27

28 Questionnaire Settings 28

29 Self-Registration User Interface 28

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 28

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners 28

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services 29

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL) 29

212 Business Add-Ins 29

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29

2131 Importing Business Scenarios 29

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31

Chapter 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch

Supplier Self-Registration 33

31 SAP Notes 33

32 Supplier Qualification Applications 33

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification 33

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview 33

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification 34

322 E-Mail Settings 35

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners 28

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27

325 Questionnaire Settings 37

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory 37

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25

462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

332 Configuring Supplier Directory 27

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier

Directory 40

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-

SUS) 40

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-

Services 12

342 Role Settings 13

3421 Activate Role 13

343 IDoc Settings 13

3431 Setting Up IDocs 13

344 Settings for the Replication 44

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication 45

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended

Classic) 47

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-

Services 47

352 Technical Settings 47

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19

353 Role and User Settings 21

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings 24

36 Business Add-Ins 52

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29

371 Importing Business Scenarios 29

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31

Chapter 4 Supplier Qualification 57

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier

Qualification 57

42 Registering Suppliers 57

43 Managing Supplier Relationship 57

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

1 Important Information About This Document

The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered

with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP

Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to

Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation

This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other

documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings

CAUTION

This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The

complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager

For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP

SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade

Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713

Business Functions

SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the

following Business Functions

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations

SRM Catalog Innovations

SRM Approval Process

SRM Continuous Innovations

SRM Implementation Simplification

SRM Service Procurement Innovations

SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services

SRM Supplier Collaboration

SRM Self-Service Procurement

SRM Analytics

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2

SRM Analytics 2

SRM Continuous Innovations 2

SRM Catalog Innovations 2

SRM Supplier Collaboration 2

1 Important Information About This Document

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762

For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom

SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches

1 Important Information About This Document

862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Activate Business Functions

22 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

517484

729355

836200

23 User Management

231 User Management

For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an

anonymous user with the necessary authorizations

Prerequisites

You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01

You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user

The user has to be of type service user

Procedure

Assigning Anonymous Users

You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find

the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing

DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962

1 Double-click the service name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are the following

ROS_SELF_REG

ROS_SELF_EDIT

ROS_PRESCREEN

You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

232 More Information About User Management

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles

24 Technical Settings

241 Supplier Qualification Overview

Features

Figure 1

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

242 Performing Technical Settings

Procedure

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in

transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate

Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can

find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM

Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage

To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration

application proceed as follows

1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM

CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display

2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat

3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the

question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)

Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login

Prerequisites

You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM

SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page

Procedure

Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab

page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the

page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying

the supplier self-registration page is applied

243 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

Maintain Services SICF

Run the following program in SAP SRM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162

Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

25 E-Mail Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

Prerequisites

Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

Procedure

Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

25 E-Mail Settings

1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 4: Supplier Qualification

26212 More Information About Technical Settings 21

2622 Role and User Settings 21

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings 24

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI) 24

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP 25

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory 27

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services

to SAP ERP 27

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27

28 Questionnaire Settings 28

29 Self-Registration User Interface 28

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 28

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners 28

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services 29

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL) 29

212 Business Add-Ins 29

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29

2131 Importing Business Scenarios 29

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31

Chapter 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch

Supplier Self-Registration 33

31 SAP Notes 33

32 Supplier Qualification Applications 33

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification 33

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview 33

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification 34

322 E-Mail Settings 35

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners 28

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27

325 Questionnaire Settings 37

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory 37

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25

462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

332 Configuring Supplier Directory 27

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier

Directory 40

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-

SUS) 40

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-

Services 12

342 Role Settings 13

3421 Activate Role 13

343 IDoc Settings 13

3431 Setting Up IDocs 13

344 Settings for the Replication 44

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication 45

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended

Classic) 47

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-

Services 47

352 Technical Settings 47

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19

353 Role and User Settings 21

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings 24

36 Business Add-Ins 52

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29

371 Importing Business Scenarios 29

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31

Chapter 4 Supplier Qualification 57

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier

Qualification 57

42 Registering Suppliers 57

43 Managing Supplier Relationship 57

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

1 Important Information About This Document

The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered

with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP

Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to

Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation

This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other

documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings

CAUTION

This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The

complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager

For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP

SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade

Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713

Business Functions

SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the

following Business Functions

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations

SRM Catalog Innovations

SRM Approval Process

SRM Continuous Innovations

SRM Implementation Simplification

SRM Service Procurement Innovations

SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services

SRM Supplier Collaboration

SRM Self-Service Procurement

SRM Analytics

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2

SRM Analytics 2

SRM Continuous Innovations 2

SRM Catalog Innovations 2

SRM Supplier Collaboration 2

1 Important Information About This Document

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762

For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom

SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches

1 Important Information About This Document

862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Activate Business Functions

22 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

517484

729355

836200

23 User Management

231 User Management

For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an

anonymous user with the necessary authorizations

Prerequisites

You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01

You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user

The user has to be of type service user

Procedure

Assigning Anonymous Users

You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find

the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing

DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962

1 Double-click the service name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are the following

ROS_SELF_REG

ROS_SELF_EDIT

ROS_PRESCREEN

You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

232 More Information About User Management

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles

24 Technical Settings

241 Supplier Qualification Overview

Features

Figure 1

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

242 Performing Technical Settings

Procedure

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in

transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate

Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can

find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM

Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage

To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration

application proceed as follows

1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM

CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display

2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat

3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the

question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)

Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login

Prerequisites

You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM

SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page

Procedure

Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab

page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the

page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying

the supplier self-registration page is applied

243 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

Maintain Services SICF

Run the following program in SAP SRM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162

Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

25 E-Mail Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

Prerequisites

Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

Procedure

Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

25 E-Mail Settings

1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 5: Supplier Qualification

332 Configuring Supplier Directory 27

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier

Directory 40

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-

SUS) 40

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-

Services 12

342 Role Settings 13

3421 Activate Role 13

343 IDoc Settings 13

3431 Setting Up IDocs 13

344 Settings for the Replication 44

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication 45

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended

Classic) 47

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-

Services 47

352 Technical Settings 47

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19

353 Role and User Settings 21

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings 24

36 Business Add-Ins 52

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29

371 Importing Business Scenarios 29

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31

Chapter 4 Supplier Qualification 57

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier

Qualification 57

42 Registering Suppliers 57

43 Managing Supplier Relationship 57

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

1 Important Information About This Document

The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered

with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP

Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to

Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation

This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other

documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings

CAUTION

This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The

complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager

For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP

SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade

Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713

Business Functions

SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the

following Business Functions

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations

SRM Catalog Innovations

SRM Approval Process

SRM Continuous Innovations

SRM Implementation Simplification

SRM Service Procurement Innovations

SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services

SRM Supplier Collaboration

SRM Self-Service Procurement

SRM Analytics

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2

SRM Analytics 2

SRM Continuous Innovations 2

SRM Catalog Innovations 2

SRM Supplier Collaboration 2

1 Important Information About This Document

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762

For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom

SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches

1 Important Information About This Document

862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Activate Business Functions

22 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

517484

729355

836200

23 User Management

231 User Management

For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an

anonymous user with the necessary authorizations

Prerequisites

You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01

You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user

The user has to be of type service user

Procedure

Assigning Anonymous Users

You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find

the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing

DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962

1 Double-click the service name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are the following

ROS_SELF_REG

ROS_SELF_EDIT

ROS_PRESCREEN

You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

232 More Information About User Management

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles

24 Technical Settings

241 Supplier Qualification Overview

Features

Figure 1

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

242 Performing Technical Settings

Procedure

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in

transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate

Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can

find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM

Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage

To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration

application proceed as follows

1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM

CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display

2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat

3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the

question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)

Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login

Prerequisites

You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM

SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page

Procedure

Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab

page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the

page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying

the supplier self-registration page is applied

243 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

Maintain Services SICF

Run the following program in SAP SRM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162

Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

25 E-Mail Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

Prerequisites

Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

Procedure

Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

25 E-Mail Settings

1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 6: Supplier Qualification

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

1 Important Information About This Document

The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered

with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP

Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to

Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation

This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other

documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings

CAUTION

This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The

complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager

For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP

SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade

Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713

Business Functions

SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the

following Business Functions

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations

SRM Catalog Innovations

SRM Approval Process

SRM Continuous Innovations

SRM Implementation Simplification

SRM Service Procurement Innovations

SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services

SRM Supplier Collaboration

SRM Self-Service Procurement

SRM Analytics

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2

SRM Analytics 2

SRM Continuous Innovations 2

SRM Catalog Innovations 2

SRM Supplier Collaboration 2

1 Important Information About This Document

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762

For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom

SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches

1 Important Information About This Document

862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Activate Business Functions

22 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

517484

729355

836200

23 User Management

231 User Management

For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an

anonymous user with the necessary authorizations

Prerequisites

You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01

You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user

The user has to be of type service user

Procedure

Assigning Anonymous Users

You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find

the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing

DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962

1 Double-click the service name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are the following

ROS_SELF_REG

ROS_SELF_EDIT

ROS_PRESCREEN

You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

232 More Information About User Management

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles

24 Technical Settings

241 Supplier Qualification Overview

Features

Figure 1

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

242 Performing Technical Settings

Procedure

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in

transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate

Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can

find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM

Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage

To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration

application proceed as follows

1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM

CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display

2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat

3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the

question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)

Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login

Prerequisites

You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM

SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page

Procedure

Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab

page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the

page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying

the supplier self-registration page is applied

243 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

Maintain Services SICF

Run the following program in SAP SRM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162

Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

25 E-Mail Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

Prerequisites

Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

Procedure

Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

25 E-Mail Settings

1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 7: Supplier Qualification

1 Important Information About This Document

The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered

with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP

Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to

Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation

This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other

documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings

CAUTION

This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The

complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager

For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP

SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade

Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713

Business Functions

SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the

following Business Functions

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations

SRM Catalog Innovations

SRM Approval Process

SRM Continuous Innovations

SRM Implementation Simplification

SRM Service Procurement Innovations

SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services

SRM Supplier Collaboration

SRM Self-Service Procurement

SRM Analytics

SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2

SRM Analytics 2

SRM Continuous Innovations 2

SRM Catalog Innovations 2

SRM Supplier Collaboration 2

1 Important Information About This Document

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762

For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom

SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches

1 Important Information About This Document

862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Activate Business Functions

22 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

517484

729355

836200

23 User Management

231 User Management

For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an

anonymous user with the necessary authorizations

Prerequisites

You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01

You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user

The user has to be of type service user

Procedure

Assigning Anonymous Users

You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find

the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing

DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962

1 Double-click the service name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are the following

ROS_SELF_REG

ROS_SELF_EDIT

ROS_PRESCREEN

You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

232 More Information About User Management

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles

24 Technical Settings

241 Supplier Qualification Overview

Features

Figure 1

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

242 Performing Technical Settings

Procedure

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in

transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate

Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can

find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM

Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage

To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration

application proceed as follows

1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM

CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display

2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat

3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the

question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)

Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login

Prerequisites

You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM

SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page

Procedure

Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab

page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the

page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying

the supplier self-registration page is applied

243 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

Maintain Services SICF

Run the following program in SAP SRM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162

Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

25 E-Mail Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

Prerequisites

Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

Procedure

Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

25 E-Mail Settings

1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 8: Supplier Qualification

For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom

SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches

1 Important Information About This Document

862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Activate Business Functions

22 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

517484

729355

836200

23 User Management

231 User Management

For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an

anonymous user with the necessary authorizations

Prerequisites

You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01

You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user

The user has to be of type service user

Procedure

Assigning Anonymous Users

You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find

the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing

DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962

1 Double-click the service name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are the following

ROS_SELF_REG

ROS_SELF_EDIT

ROS_PRESCREEN

You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

232 More Information About User Management

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles

24 Technical Settings

241 Supplier Qualification Overview

Features

Figure 1

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

242 Performing Technical Settings

Procedure

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in

transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate

Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can

find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM

Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage

To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration

application proceed as follows

1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM

CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display

2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat

3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the

question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)

Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login

Prerequisites

You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM

SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page

Procedure

Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab

page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the

page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying

the supplier self-registration page is applied

243 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

Maintain Services SICF

Run the following program in SAP SRM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162

Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

25 E-Mail Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

Prerequisites

Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

Procedure

Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

25 E-Mail Settings

1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 9: Supplier Qualification

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Activate Business Functions

22 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

517484

729355

836200

23 User Management

231 User Management

For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an

anonymous user with the necessary authorizations

Prerequisites

You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01

You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user

The user has to be of type service user

Procedure

Assigning Anonymous Users

You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find

the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing

DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

21 Activate Business Function

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962

1 Double-click the service name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are the following

ROS_SELF_REG

ROS_SELF_EDIT

ROS_PRESCREEN

You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

232 More Information About User Management

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles

24 Technical Settings

241 Supplier Qualification Overview

Features

Figure 1

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

242 Performing Technical Settings

Procedure

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in

transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate

Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can

find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM

Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage

To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration

application proceed as follows

1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM

CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display

2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat

3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the

question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)

Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login

Prerequisites

You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM

SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page

Procedure

Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab

page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the

page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying

the supplier self-registration page is applied

243 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

Maintain Services SICF

Run the following program in SAP SRM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162

Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

25 E-Mail Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

Prerequisites

Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

Procedure

Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

25 E-Mail Settings

1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 10: Supplier Qualification

1 Double-click the service name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are the following

ROS_SELF_REG

ROS_SELF_EDIT

ROS_PRESCREEN

You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

232 More Information About User Management

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles

24 Technical Settings

241 Supplier Qualification Overview

Features

Figure 1

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

242 Performing Technical Settings

Procedure

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in

transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate

Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can

find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM

Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage

To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration

application proceed as follows

1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM

CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display

2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat

3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the

question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)

Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login

Prerequisites

You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM

SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page

Procedure

Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab

page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the

page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying

the supplier self-registration page is applied

243 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

Maintain Services SICF

Run the following program in SAP SRM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162

Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

25 E-Mail Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

Prerequisites

Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

Procedure

Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

25 E-Mail Settings

1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 11: Supplier Qualification

242 Performing Technical Settings

Procedure

Activating Supplier Qualification Services

Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in

transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate

Service

The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can

find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM

Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage

To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration

application proceed as follows

1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM

CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display

2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat

3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the

question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)

Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login

Prerequisites

You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM

SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page

Procedure

Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab

page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the

page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying

the supplier self-registration page is applied

243 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

Maintain Services SICF

Run the following program in SAP SRM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

24 Technical Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162

Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

25 E-Mail Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

Prerequisites

Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

Procedure

Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

25 E-Mail Settings

1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 12: Supplier Qualification

Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

25 E-Mail Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)

2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

Prerequisites

Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

Procedure

Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

25 E-Mail Settings

1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 13: Supplier Qualification

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

2612 Role Settings

26121 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

2613 IDoc Settings

26131 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 14: Supplier Qualification

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 15: Supplier Qualification

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 16: Supplier Qualification

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

2614 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 17: Supplier Qualification

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 18: Supplier Qualification

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

The following SAP Note applies

756472

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 19: Supplier Qualification

262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management

Functions Supplier Qualification

2621 Technical Settings

26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 20: Supplier Qualification

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 21: Supplier Qualification

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

26212 More Information About Technical Settings

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF

The following SAP Note applies

517484

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication

2622 Role and User Settings

26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 22: Supplier Qualification

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 23: Supplier Qualification

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 24: Supplier Qualification

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

26222 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner

Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web

Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 25: Supplier Qualification

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Role Maintenance PFCG

Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP

264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 26: Supplier Qualification

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

26 Supplier Replication and Transfer

2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 27: Supplier Qualification

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

2642 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

27 Category and Hierarchy Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 28: Supplier Qualification

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

28 Questionnaire Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY

Translation Initial Screen SE63

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Note applies

840661

29 Self-Registration User Interface

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen

210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

2101 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

28 Questionnaire Settings

2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 29: Supplier Qualification

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for

Suppliers

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings

212 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management

Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins

Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2131 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 30: Supplier Qualification

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 31: Supplier Qualification

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 32: Supplier Qualification

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 33: Supplier Qualification

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

840661

517484

836200

729355

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

321 Settings for Supplier Qualification

3211 Supplier Qualification Overview

Figure 2

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

31 SAP Notes

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 34: Supplier Qualification

3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification

Prerequisites

You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier

Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run

Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client

CAUTION

You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the

SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services

See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP

NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces

for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)

For more information see the following SAP Note

455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP

The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user

with the necessary authorizations

This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01

The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned

to this user

The user type has to be Service user

Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY

Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT

Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create

product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP

ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-

registration system

Procedure

Maintaining Questionnaires

See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 35: Supplier Qualification

Assigning Anonymous User

Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)

You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching

for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

ROS_SELF_REG

1 Double-click the application name

2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client

Activating Supplier Qualification Applications

BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction

SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service

The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and

ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP

Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage

To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application

1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display

2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic

3 Double-click mainhtm

4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page

NOTE

On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client

The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)

Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection

During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If

you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report

ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP

322 E-Mail Settings

The following SAP Notes apply

455140

779972

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 36: Supplier Qualification

323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services

3231 Making Settings for Business Partners

Prerequisites

You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers

[external document]

You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-

Services [page 19]

To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction

Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)

Procedure

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http

ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg

2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity

3 Choose Save

3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)

Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)

HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers

Run the following program in SAP SRM

Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)

324 Category and Hierarchy Settings

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)

Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)

Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

32 Supplier Qualification Applications

3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 37: Supplier Qualification

SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications

Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product

categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration

system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system

For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt

Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking

Completion of Download

325 Questionnaire Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic

Settings

CreateChange Questionnaire

Select Product Categories for Registration

Language Selection for Questionnaire

Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category

For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library

SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

Business Services Web Survey

The following SAP Notes apply

840661

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

331 Configuring Supplier Preselection

Procedure

Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier

self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client

If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL

in transaction PFCG

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 38: Supplier Qualification

Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System

1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you

have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well

2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes

3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client

number that is used by the registration system

4 Save your data

Complete the following steps in the registration system

CAUTION

To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system

1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application

CAUTION

Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the

corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners

You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier

preselection is carried out in another system or in another client

The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC

2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system

with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN

3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template

4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC

5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before

6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process

NOTE

If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position

and the position itself before you repeat the procedure

Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access

supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu

NOTE

For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver

Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides

If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 39: Supplier Qualification

If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting

supplier preselection

Open Partner Interface (OPI)

Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM

To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier

preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM

NOTE

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define

External Web Services

URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen

maindo

Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application

Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration

system using transaction SE80

Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter

ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller

Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL

You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via

transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )

Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection

The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data

from them

The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be

maintained in the registration system

See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data

Content Management Define External Web Services

You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set

You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups

via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )

NOTE

The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in

another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 40: Supplier Qualification

332 Configuring Supplier Directory

Procedure

Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server

To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to

define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table

BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use

transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating

the Organizational Plan [external document]

333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services

SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System

SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation

Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM

RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)

Role Maintenance (PFCG)

Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)

Call View Maintenance (SM30)

Object Navigator (SE80)

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services

Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the

procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled

For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including

details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide

PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the

supplier self-services system

ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 41: Supplier Qualification

1 Configure the partner profile

2 Create a model view

3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-

services

4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment

Classification tab

5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields

1 Vendor number

2 Class

3 Message type

4 Target System

After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent

to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP

NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system

342 Role Settings

3421 Activate Role

Procedure

If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP

SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This

means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions

Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)

343 IDoc Settings

3431 Setting Up IDocs

In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-

relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class

Procedure

Creating a Reduced Message Type

Transaction Code

BD53

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 42: Supplier Qualification

1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with

the following segments

E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data

| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement

|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD

2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor

KTOKK () Vendor account group

LAND1 () Country of company

NAME1 () Employees last name

NAME2 (+) Employees last name

ORT01 () City

ORT02 (+) District

PFACH (+) PO Box

PSTL2 () Postal Code

PSTLZ () Postal Code

REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)

SORTL () Character field length = 10

SPRAS () Language key

STCD1 (+) Tax number 1

STCD2 (+) Tax number 2

STRAS (+) House number and street

TELF1 (+) First telephone number

TELFX (+) Fax number

ADRNR (+) Address

TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code

3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields

Field Text

LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator

4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields

Field Text

MSGFN () Function

LIFNR () Vendors account number

EKORG () Purchasing organization

WAERS () Purchase order currency

5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 43: Supplier Qualification

CAUTION

After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain

the fields marked with (+)

Defining Change-Relevant Fields

Transaction Code BD52

Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields

1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 Delete the following entry

Object Table Field

KRED LFA1 ADRNR

Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution

Prerequisites

If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Double-click on the ALV class type

5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type

6 Save your entries

If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment

1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes

Maintain Object Types and Class Types

2 Choose vendor LFA1

3 Double-click Class Types

4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)

5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution

6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section

7 Save your entries

Procedure

Transaction Code CL01

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types

1 Choose Class type ALV

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 44: Supplier Qualification

2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt

3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier

Replication

4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released

5 Choose Save

Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class

Transaction Code

BD68

Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution

Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System

1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt

2 Choose New Entries

3 Enter a record with the following data

Message Type Class PoP

Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)

344 Settings for the Replication

The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant

to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship

Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits

EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process

Managing Supplier Relationships

3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data

In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated

Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the

company code

Procedure

Setting up Vendor Account Numbers

Transaction Code XK01

Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create

1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 45: Supplier Qualification

2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class

Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier

3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country

NOTE

Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS

4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address

NOTE

Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have

determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in

transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication

See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control

Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

Initially Replicating Vendor Data

Transaction Code BD14

Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send

1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field

3 Choose Execute

Synchronizing Vendor Data

Transaction Code SE38

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor

1 Choose report RBDMIDOC

2 Create variant MM-SUS

3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM

NOTE

Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS

3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication

Run the following program in SAP ERP

Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)

3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001

To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add

coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 46: Supplier Qualification

CAUTION

You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable

purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472

Prerequisites

You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM

Procedure

Defining the Identification Type

Transaction code CMOD

Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management

1 Choose Project ZPSMM

2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component

EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project

3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue

data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A

ls_data_m type E1LFA1M

ls_idoc_data type edidd

lv_index type sy-tabix

if segment_name = E1LFA1A

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M

ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata

clear ls_idoc_data

read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name

ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata

lv_index = sy-tabix

select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl

where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR

and flgdefault = X

ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a

modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index

endif

4 Activate the enhancement assignment

NOTE

Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)

4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 47: Supplier Qualification

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services

Procedure

To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator

You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated

automatically

Result

The following process starts automatically

1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail

contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services

2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create

users

3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and

URL to each of the users

4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services

352 Technical Settings

3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services

You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start

the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous

login for the self-registration

For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM

Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier

Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system

Creating and Assigning Users

Transaction Code SU01

1 Enter a user name for example sus_service

2 Choose Create

3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area

4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 48: Supplier Qualification

SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING

SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1

5 Choose Save

Activating SICF Services

Transaction Code SICF

NOTE

For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note

517484

Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu

sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages

sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects

sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts

sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library

sap public bc

sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services

sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)

sap public bsp sap public bc

sap public bsp sap system

sap public bc ur

sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback

sap xi

Creating Aliases

Transaction Code SICF

Creating an alias for supplier self-registration

1 Choose Execute

2 Choose External Aliases

3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases

The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears

4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg

5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning

Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security

Requirements area

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 49: Supplier Qualification

NOTE

We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction

SMICM

6 Enter a password

7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts

Services selection tree as follows

ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg

8 Save your entries

9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap

srmsus_selfreg

Adjusting URLs

Transaction Code SICF

Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners

To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field

NOTE

Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-

registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg

This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration

process

Result

The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration

can be started directly

353 Role and User Settings

3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management

When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services

you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business

Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine

You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for

bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)

In this procedure you do the following

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 50: Supplier Qualification

Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users

through user management

Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required

Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end

if required

Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required

Procedure

Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system

Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup

Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM

SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it

NOTE

Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user

name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http

lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM

administrator

CAUTION

The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and

should only be assigned after careful consideration

Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol

For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required

You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the

Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP

Defining Roles

Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles

1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity

Define roles

If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a

new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes

Authorizations or menu entries

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 51: Supplier Qualification

NOTE

For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific

settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG

2 Choose Change Role

3 Choose the Personalization tab

NOTE

The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy

of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes

specific to supplier self-services

4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and

choose Change values

The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box

5 Perform the following steps if necessary

Selecting Means that

Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user

Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer

SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data

SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself

Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time

Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time

Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time

NOTE

You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-

Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The

notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 52: Supplier Qualification

a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to

make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of

send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity

6 Choose Save

Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles

If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating

Role Profiles [external document]

Upgrading User Data

CAUTION

You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade

the previous data is no longer available

NOTE

For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note

729355

If you want to change from Do the following

User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40

No steps are necessary

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM

UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40

Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT

SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run

NOTE

In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems

to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated

3532 More Information About Role and User Settings

Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM

SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles

36 Business Add-Ins

The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship

Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

36 Business Add-Ins

5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 53: Supplier Qualification

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers

Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

371 Importing Business Scenarios

In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration

Repository generate it and activate it

Prerequisites

You must have done the following

Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP

in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process

Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70

Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See

SAP Note 836200

Procedure

1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 In the left pane select the Objects tab

4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System

5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This

opens the wizard

6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps

7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business

system is already set up)

8 Select a business system

9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them

automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory

(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information

10 Choose Finish and then choose Close

11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens

a wizard

12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http

sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)

13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 54: Supplier Qualification

14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically

15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens

16 Choose Apply

17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens

18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services

19 Choose Assign

20 Select the related service and choose OK

21 Assign a business service to all roles

22 Choose Configure Connections

23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab

24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field

25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI

NOTE

If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder

automatically creates the communication channels

If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication

channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication

Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each

connection

26 Choose OK and then choose Apply

27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window

28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation

29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required

30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply

31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added

32 In the left pane select the Change List tab

33 Expand the Standard Change List

34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate

372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces

In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is

assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier

Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the

Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in

the Integration Builder

SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 55: Supplier Qualification

CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut

Procedure

1 Start the SAP Integration Builder

2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration

3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information

373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM

ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration

37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 56: Supplier Qualification

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 57: Supplier Qualification

4 Supplier Qualification

You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a

link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more

product categories

Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be

transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in

an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)

You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Select the Documentation tab

The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http

helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager

under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification

42 Registering Suppliers

The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps

1 Carry out self-registration

2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)

3 Approve suppliers

4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps

1 Assign supplier role

2 Enable editing of own data

4 Supplier Qualification

41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 58: Supplier Qualification

3 Change own data

4 Accept changes in supplier data

5 Change supplier data

6 Lock supplier

7 Create approved supplier list

You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier

Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab

4 Supplier Qualification

43 Managing Supplier Relationship

5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 59: Supplier Qualification

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo

Example Example

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address

example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456

Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options

Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and

names of installation upgrade and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 60: Supplier Qualification

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20

wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices

DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides

6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks
Page 61: Supplier Qualification

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom

copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice

  • SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
    • Table of Contents
    • 1 Important Information About This Document
    • 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
      • 21 Activate Business Function
      • 22 SAP Notes
      • 23 User Management
        • 231 User Management
        • 232 More Information About User Management
          • 24 Technical Settings
            • 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
            • 242 Performing Technical Settings
            • 243 More Information About Technical Settings
              • 25 E-Mail Settings
              • 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
                • 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
                  • 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                  • 2612 Role Settings
                    • 26121 Activate Role
                      • 2613 IDoc Settings
                        • 26131 Setting Up IDocs
                          • 2614 Settings for the Replication
                            • 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                            • 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                            • 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                • 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
                                  • 2621 Technical Settings
                                    • 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                    • 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
                                      • 2622 Role and User Settings
                                        • 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                        • 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                            • 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
                                            • 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                              • 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                              • 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                              • 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
                                                  • 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                  • 28 Questionnaire Settings
                                                  • 29 Self-Registration User Interface
                                                  • 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                    • 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                    • 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                      • 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
                                                      • 212 Business Add-Ins
                                                      • 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                        • 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                        • 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                        • 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                            • 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
                                                              • 31 SAP Notes
                                                              • 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
                                                                • 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
                                                                  • 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
                                                                  • 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
                                                                    • 322 E-Mail Settings
                                                                    • 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                      • 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
                                                                      • 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                        • 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
                                                                        • 325 Questionnaire Settings
                                                                          • 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
                                                                            • 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
                                                                            • 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
                                                                              • 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
                                                                                • 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                • 342 Role Settings
                                                                                  • 3421 Activate Role
                                                                                    • 343 IDoc Settings
                                                                                      • 3431 Setting Up IDocs
                                                                                        • 344 Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
                                                                                          • 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
                                                                                          • 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
                                                                                              • 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
                                                                                                • 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                • 352 Technical Settings
                                                                                                  • 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
                                                                                                    • 353 Role and User Settings
                                                                                                      • 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
                                                                                                      • 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
                                                                                                          • 36 Business Add-Ins
                                                                                                          • 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                            • 371 Importing Business Scenarios
                                                                                                            • 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
                                                                                                            • 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
                                                                                                                • 4 Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
                                                                                                                  • 42 Registering Suppliers
                                                                                                                  • 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
                                                                                                                      • Copyright and trademarks